JP6925960B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be set to a plurality of production modes corresponding to different productions.

Some conventional gaming machines can switch the effect mode (effect setting) during variable display. Further, in such a gaming machine, the switching of the effect mode is restricted according to the situation of the variable display (the change of the effect mode is restricted), and the effect mode switching operation is performed during the restriction. In some cases, a switching failure display indicating that the effect mode has not been switched may be performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-104704

However, Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the game while the change of the effect mode is restricted only by displaying the switching failure.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest while the change of the production mode is restricted.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the means A of the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
An effect execution means that can execute an effect according to the progress of the game,
A production mode selection means that can select one production mode from a plurality of production modes,
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
With
The effect mode selection means can select the effect mode based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means.
The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect suggesting content that is advantageous to the player, and may display a plurality of restriction displays for notifying that a predetermined limit is being executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition related to the effect. Can be displayed in different display modes,
Ri ratio Do different to the suggestion effect is performed by the display mode of the limit indication,
The predetermined limitation is that the effect mode cannot be selected by the effect mode selection means.
The effect executing means can display the restriction display based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means during the execution of the predetermined restriction.
It is characterized by that.
In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the hand stage 1,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is performing variable display during effect processing) that can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which the effect symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit) that suggests advantageous contents for the player. The part to execute) and
Notifies that a predetermined restriction (for example, the effect mode cannot be changed) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, during a variable display of super reach or a decision to execute a look-ahead notice effect) is being executed. (For example, the operation restriction display image 127SG005c) can be displayed in a plurality of different display modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect mode change operation limit display effect) shown in FIG. The part that executes the process) and
With
The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the display mode of the restriction display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19, the decorative design is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit depending on the size and color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c. It is characterized by the fact that the proportions are different).
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while paying attention to the restricted display.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A portion in which the specific suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display) capable of executing the specific suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which the effect symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit) regarding the advantageous state. )When,
A restricted display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a restricted display (for example, an operation restricted display image 127SG005c) for notifying that the change of the effect mode is restricted in a plurality of different display modes is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process shown in 10-20) and
With more
The rate at which the specific suggestion effect is executed by the specific suggestion effect execution means differs depending on the display mode of the restriction display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19, a decorative pattern depends on the size and color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c. The part where the ratio of derivation and display is different depending on the combination indicating the big hit)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the game entertainment while paying attention to the restricted display.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
It is possible to perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A determination means for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state when the variable display is started (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 5), and
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 10-8).
With respect to the variable display corresponding to the hold storage, the determination means for determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state before the determination means is determined (for example, the CPU 103 performs the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-9). The part to execute) and
A look-ahead notice determination means that determines a look-ahead notice effect that is an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode setting means and is controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination of the determination means. (For example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-12).
Based on the determination of the look-ahead notice determination means, the look-ahead notice effect execution means (for example, the hold display notice effect) that executes the look-ahead notice effect until the variable display based on the hold memory corresponding to the look-ahead notice effect is started. When the execution is decided, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process shown in FIG. 10-11, and when the execution of the background change notice effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 10-11. The part that executes the background image update process shown, and the part that the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of 127SGS358 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-23 when the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is determined).
With more
The predetermined condition is a condition related to the determination of the determination means (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in 127 SGS343 of the effect mode change process shown in FIG. 10-17. The part that ends the effect mode change process without executing the process of 127SGS345 to 127SGS349)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to eliminate the waste that the determination is repeatedly made by changing the setting of the effect mode.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
The look-ahead notice determination means makes the determination so that at least one of the effect mode and the effect timing of the look-ahead advance notice effect differs depending on the effect mode (for example, when the execution of the background change advance notice effect is determined in the A mode). And when the execution of the chance eye notice effect is decided in the B mode, the effect mode and the effect timing are different between the background change notice effect and the chance eye notice effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect mode and the effect timing of the look-ahead notice effect from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
It is possible to perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A determination means for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state when the variable display is started (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 5), and
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 10-8).
With respect to the variable display corresponding to the hold storage, the determination means for determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state before the determination means is determined (for example, the CPU 103 performs the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-9). The part to execute) and
Based on the determination of the determination means, the look-ahead notice determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 10-12) capable of determining the execution of the look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state. The part that executes the setting process) and
Based on the determination of the look-ahead notice determination means, the look-ahead notice effect execution means (for example, the hold display notice effect) that executes the look-ahead notice effect until the variable display based on the hold memory corresponding to the look-ahead notice effect is started. When the execution is decided, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process shown in FIG. 10-11, and when the execution of the background change notice effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 10-11. The part that executes the background image update process shown, and the part that the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of 127SGS358 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-23 when the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is determined).
When the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined by the look-ahead notice determination means, a mode-compatible effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode setting means is executed. Possible mode-corresponding effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display advance notice effect notification execution process shown in FIG. 10-11).
With more
The predetermined condition is that the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined by the look-ahead notice determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in 127 SGS343 of the effect mode change process shown in FIG. 10-17. The part that ends the effect mode change process without executing the process of 127SGS345-127SGS349 when it is determined that the execution is decided)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate mode-compatible effect from being executed.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 5.
The effect setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) allows the player to change the settings related to the effect (for example, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R) different from the effect mode change by the effect mode setting means. The part that executes the volume change processing shown in 10-21) and
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect setting change limiting means for restricting the change of the setting by the effect setting means (for example, as shown in the modification 127SG-1, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided or the super reach The part that makes it impossible to change the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R by operating the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction during execution of the fluctuation display).
A restriction display means capable of displaying a restriction display for notifying that the restriction by the effect setting change restriction means is being executed (for example, as shown in the modified example 127SG-1, the stick controller 31A can be operated in the left-right direction. The part that displays the volume changeable notification image 127SG005e on the image display device 5) and
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the setting related to the effect is restricted.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. Explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change processing in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is a diagram showing a data holding area for effect control, and (B) is a diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a part example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the A mode and the determination ratio of the effect type, and (B) shows whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the B mode and the determination rate of the effect type. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing the display pattern determination ratio of the hold display advance notice effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the background image of the background change advance notice effect, and (C) is a stop pattern in the chance eye advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of hold display notice effect notification execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect, and (C) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation limit display effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect execution mode change operation restriction display effect execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of volume change processing. It is a timing chart which shows the period during which the production mode can be changed and the volume can be changed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the step-up notice effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the dialogue advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variation display in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. -2, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled and the effect of the effect is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop, and the reach mode is established. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the image display device 5 has the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A, which is confronted by, is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (F). (Here, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is changed. Be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B, which is confronted by, is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (Fig. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of the reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same production contents as those in FIG. 8-2 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), the Super Reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D is executed. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expected degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expected degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, or the expected degree may be suggested. The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), the image 31AK013 is displayed. A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. , The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character that is residently displayed during the variable display, and the display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 8-4 As shown in (B), the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. It may be displayed. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but first five white stars are displayed and the stage. It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 is expected to move. The effect of fitting into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and 8-5 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to 8-5, black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step, but the number of black stars is two. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, half a black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes diverse and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in a different effect mode. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

8-5 (G) to 8-5 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to 8-5 (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. The effect of fitting into one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and 8-5 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive effect) may be made different in the effect mode. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). A development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character "SP Reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. Is notified, and as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the superreach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined as one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). ), The reliability of the jackpot is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, although the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The ratio of the dialogue notice and which production mode changes (the ratio of acting on which) may be different, or the ratio of changing to what color (how many stages) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal display, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal display. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 31AK-1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of the super reach effect operation in the modified example 31AK-1 in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character character 31AK041. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. The large button image changes to 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is centered as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability when it is done is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification example 31AK-2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of Feature 122SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. The front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is omitted because it is the same as the feature portion 31AK described above. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 122SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 122SG051 for switching between a setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. The setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state, and the opening sensor 122SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back left portion of the board case 122SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 122SG201.

Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 3 in use. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) by using a setting key. In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ), And different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variation display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value changing operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying wp that the operation for confirming the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changed state). The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the feature unit 122SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 9-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the jackpot expectation that the fluctuation display result becomes "big hit" are set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value of 3 is set as the fluctuation pattern that causes non-reach loss when executed twice, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to obtain a fluctuation pattern that causes super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and FIG. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -6 (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), and the jackpot type determination shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal figure display result judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown). ) Etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. It has become. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 3 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 3 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is stepwise. In other words, as for the set value, 3 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 2 and 1, the more advantageous the value for the amusement park side.

9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), in each display result determination table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), the normal state or the time reduction state (low). More judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" than in the case of "certain state". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability is determined (in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/150 when the set value is 2, and 1/99 when the set value is 3). In comparison, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher (in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the set value is 1/150, and the set value is 2 is 1/99, and 3 is 1/50). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

Further, in each display result judgment table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). Judgment values are assigned so that the probabilities determined when controlling the small hit game are the same (for example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/99 when the set value is 2, and the set value). When is 3, it is 1/50).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit gaming state or small hit. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is low, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit game state or small hit game. Judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined when the state is controlled is high (big hit probability and small hit probability: set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). If any of the hit determination values is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), a mode in which the winning probability of the small hit is different is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). May be.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and it is individually judged whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit. May be good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), each display result determination table is assigned a determination value for a small hit, which is shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). The display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1) does not have to be assigned a determination value to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

9-7 (A) and 9-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 9-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, in FIG. 9-7 (B), the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9-8. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. ..

Further, the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The present invention is not limited to this, and the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits, which is used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss, which is used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss", are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 200 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and the set values are lower in the order of 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may become a “big hit B” or a “big hit C”. It is possible to raise the expectation of.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value is a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 0 regardless of whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Of the 997s, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1, 2, and 3.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved memories of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 500 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 500 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

In this way, when the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher. , The set values 3, 2, and 1 are lowered in this order. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. When each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common determination ratio" in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is different from the "common determination ratio" in which the determination ratios are completely the same with different set values (feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment) and different set values. (For example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between the set value 1 to the set value 3).

In addition, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratio of all the variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value set. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super reach α is illustrated. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are both regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which is the same regardless of the set value set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is lost, a mode in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The fluctuation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (C), changes are made using a change pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss is set regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 3 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random value assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the ratio in which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a variation pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). NS. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number of stored data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passing gate, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, the necessary initial settings are performed (122SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. When the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (122SGSa005). .. In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped by the parity bit or the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start wait timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 starts (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board start wait timer is set to -1 (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa008). When the effect control board start wait start timer is not timered out (122SGSa008; N), 122SGsa007 is executed again and waits for a period until the effect control board 12 starts. Further, when the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out of the timer (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 is open (122SGSa009a). When the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), the setting value confirmation process for displaying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed on the display monitor 122SG029, and the clerk of the game hall or the like displays it. By visually recognizing the monitor 122SG029, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (setting change state) (122SGSa010). If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009; N) or the release sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa011 after the set value confirmation process is executed. That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is activated without being operated, the set value is set if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is unconfirmable.

In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the effect control board to wait during the period until the effect control board 12 starts. Then, the value of the effect control board start wait timer is set to -1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa016). When the effect control board activation start wait timer is not timer-out (122SGsa016; N), 122SGsa015 is executed again and the effect control board 12 waits for a period until it is activated. When the effect control board start wait timer is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then the lock switch 122SG051 is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa018).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 sends a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, and proceeds to the 122SGsa021 (12SGsa021). 122SGSa019).

Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). When the open sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the setting change process for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa020). Is executed, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021. That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the set value cannot be changed unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. ing.

When the open sensor 122SG090 is OFF in 122SGSa019a, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set (122SGSa022) so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process executed by the CPU 103. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the 122SGSa033 to wait until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034), and issues a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. It is transmitted and the set value confirmation process is completed (122SGSa035).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, by ending the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation process), the state becomes the same as when starting with a normal hot start, so that the process of 122SGSa035 is performed. The command to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

FIG. 9-13 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). When the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 and proceeds to the 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not saved in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the first address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) "00H" at the specified address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is automatically set to a set value by setting "00H" to the address F000. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 and proceed to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047), if the specified address is the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046). Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Furthermore, at other addresses (F002, F003, etc.), in addition to clear switch backup information that can identify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, special figure hold memory and normal figure hold Game information including storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is an address (F001 to FXXX) excluding the address (F000) in which the set value is stored when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data. ) Clears data other than the set value by storing "00H", but if there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or there is no backup data, "00H" is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. It is a process to clear all the data including the set value by storing.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the head address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. May be good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 in this way, when the RAM clearing process shown in FIG. 9-13 (A) is executed, the address to clear the data is immediately before the last address of the RAM 102. It is sufficient to specify the address of and store "00H" sequentially from the address F000 to the address immediately before the address.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the data excluding the set value of the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, but the present invention is limited to this. When the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. You may do it.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch backup information can be used for game control. A process of storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register). May be omitted so that the processing load of the CPU 103 can be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the clear switch backup information is stored in the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the processing from being overwritten by other information (data).

FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the set value change process is started (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGsa018). Then, the set value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054). When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch in 122SGsa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGsa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes 122SGSa054-122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or is stored in the address F001. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 (temporary set value displayed in the display monitor 122SG029) in the address F000, so that the set value stored in the address F001 is set as the present set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko game machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command according to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change processing is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the setting value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the game control main process (immediately after the setting change process is completed).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 (temporary setting value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is illustrated in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening, the operation of the clear switch, the pushing operation of the lock switch 122SG051, etc. By turning off the lock switch 122SG051 after executing the operation of, a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start or is started in a setting change state, a cold start notification command or a setting value change start is given to the effect control board 12. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process is executed before the notification command is transmitted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is a cold start notification to the effect control board 12. It may be executed after sending a command or a setting value change start notification command.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is executed again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). (Clear the data of). By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems such as the game being started while the invalid data is stored in the RAM.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is started after executing a common RAM clear process (122SGSa017) between the case of starting the pachinko game machine 1 in the cold start and the case of starting it in the setting change state. An example is an example in which a command corresponding to a state (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, or setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, but the present invention is limited to this. The command according to the activated state (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, setting value change) depends on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start or in the setting change state. A common RAM clear process may be executed after the end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-15, the CPU 103 first executes the power failure detection process (122SGS020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and then executes the switch process (S21) to the command control process (S27). .. As shown in FIGS. 9-16, in the power supply cutoff detection process, the CPU 103 first receives an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no power off signal input (122SGSa051; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (122SGSa051; Y), the backup data including the set value stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Next, the effect control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the command reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404). When the command reception waiting timer goes out of the timer (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer goes out of the timer.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (122SGS404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared) and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

When the hot start notification command is not received (122SGS405; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of jackpots stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). , Information including the number of super reach times, etc.) (122SGS408), the information stored in the RAM 102 was cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 were cleared. The RAM clear notification process for performing the notification (execution of the RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started after displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices if it is possible to notify the clerk of the game hall or the like that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

Further, when the cold start notification command is not received (122SGS407; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the notification that the setting value is being changed (notification during setting value change). ) Is being changed while the setting value is being changed (122SGS411). In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, generally, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, and the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value is the main board 11. The display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the machine is being visually recognized. That is, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value, so that the clerk of the game hall displays the image. From the display of the device 5, it is considered that it is not possible to determine whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as a notification during the setting value change, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state to the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You just need to notify that you are doing it.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command are received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value is completed (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value specification command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is received from the received setting value specification command. (Value) is specified, and the specified set value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as set value information (values of "1" to "3" according to the set value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the processes of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409 described above, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the set value change end notification command and the set value specification command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processes of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 are repeatedly executed.

The feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the setting value changing notification is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value changing notification is used. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the setting value changing notification, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the setting value changing notification, or the RAM is cleared after the setting value changing notification is completed. Notification may be executed.

Further, when the setting value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state. It is determined whether or not it has been started (122SGS414). When the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (122SGS414; Y), the setting value confirmation notification process for notifying that the setting confirmation state (the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029) is performed. Execute (122SGS415). In the setting value confirmation notification process, the clerk of the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying the image on the image display device 5, emitting the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like, and the clerk of the game hall. It suffices if it is possible to notify the surroundings of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the setting is confirmed. If the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the set value confirmation end notification command (122SGS410; N), it proceeds to the process of 122SGS405, and proceeds to the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change start notification command, and the setting. It waits until any command of the value confirmation start notification command is received (the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, 122SGS414 is repeatedly executed).

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start state or the setting change state, the player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since the input of the player information is received from the RAM 122, the information for production (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, etc.) The RAM 122 does not clear the (number of times of super reach, etc.) and the set value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "3" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is the set value information already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to overwrite (update memory).

That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the production information are cleared, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. Although the form in which the player information and the production information are not cleared is illustrated in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game is played. The person information and the production information may be cleared.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays an image. The device 5 starts displaying the initial symbol corresponding to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is used. When set, the set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when it is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a set value that is advantageous for the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set or a setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, "3") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the pre-reading restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (122SGS421). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the above. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table by executing the start notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. Depending on the presence, the mode of notification of activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the output sound A is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

Further, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game effect. The lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds, the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound C for 20 seconds, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). To execute. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

That is, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. It refers to the output of C and the display of the message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5.

As described above, since the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output start timing of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display start timing of the image display device 5 are the same, these pachinko games Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period is 60 seconds when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start), and the cold start notification command. Is received (when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the setting value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the setting changed state). The period is 40 seconds.

The feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer of a game hall or a management device such as a counter for each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. A signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device as an activation notification at the time of the activation.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, a part of the device that executes the start notification is common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the setting changed. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers), and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, the sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as a notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of is executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, set value confirmation end notification command, and set value change end notification command, even if it is received, the pachinko game machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Although a mode in which different combinations of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the player is started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used as an initialization effect. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part of them may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 then executes the power failure detection process (122SGS422). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first has an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Whether or not it is determined (122SGS431). If there is no power off signal input (122SGS431; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (122SGS431; Y), the set value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The backup data to be included is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 9-3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a random number update process for production (122SGS425) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a random number for production such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a player information input process (122SGS426) that accepts input of player information, and a game. The player information output process (122SGS427) for outputting the person information and the effect information aggregation process (122SGS428) for aggregating the effect information are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. In addition, the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server, thereby performing the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as the effect information each time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. do.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). When the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is "0" (122SGS441; Y), after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

Further, when the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is any one of "1" to "4" (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of "0", "2" to "7" (122SGS442; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is set to -1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7), any of the processes is executed. By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variation display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variation display is performed four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated throughout, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (FIG. By not executing (see 5), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the cold start or in the setting change state, the game is related to the progress of the game based on the fact that the game is possible. As a setting, a mode of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is set whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Based on the fact that the game is possible regardless of whether it is started in the changed state, the settings related to the progress of the game depend on the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The setting of the effect may be set to the state at the time of shipment from the factory.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the effect control CPU 120 is the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the reach production and the reach production of Super Reach C and Super Reach D as the second suggestion production, and when executing the reach production of Super Reach C and Super Reach D, the Super Reach C Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach production of the super reach D, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production can be executed, and the production effect. Can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 122SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as pachinko gaming machines, for example, there are those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-42880 and those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-42880 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started). (When), a command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory that the main board (game control board) is backed up. And, regardless of the memory that the main board is backed up, the command output from the main board to the effect control board in order to clear the backed up memory, and the state in which the setting value of the gaming machine can be changed. If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, the effect control board will be appropriate according to the activation state when the gaming machine is turned on and started. There was a problem that various processes could not be executed. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 122SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. The part to do) and
A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the RAM clear shown in FIG. 9-17) capable of controlling the effect based on the control information output from the game control means (for example, the effect control command shown in FIG. 9-3). Notification processing, setting value changing notification processing, setting value confirmation notification processing, etc.) and
With
The first activation of the game control means is restored based on the stored contents stored in the backup storage means as an activation state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. A state (for example, hot start), a second activation state (for example, cold start) in which the stored contents are erased and restored regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and a setting by the setting means are possible. It becomes one of the third activation states (for example, the setting change state), and different control information corresponding to the activation state is output to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14). In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, the CPU 103 sends a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the CPU 103 is the effect control board. When a cold start notification command is sent to 12 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 sends a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the effect control means can execute an appropriate process according to the activation state of the game control means when the power supply is started. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 122SG,
A storage means for effect control (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means is provided.
Of the information stored in the effect control storage means, the information to be erased differs depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state (the information to be deleted is different (). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasing according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 122SG,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) that specifies the end of the third activation state.
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activated state based on the output of the control information designating the end of the third activated state (for example, shown in FIG. 9-20). As described above, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds in the activation notification process. Then, the part that executes the display of the message image for 40 seconds (for example, the message image indicating that the change of the set value is completed) on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activated state or the second activated state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, is hot). Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the set value cannot be set in the activated state by the specific control.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 122SG,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the activation state to which the control information corresponds (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 receives the hot start notification command. In the start notification process, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the part that executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R and the reception of the cold start notification command. For effect control based on the part that executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the activation notification process and the reception of the setting value change end notification command. A portion in which the CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, outputs an output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and executes a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 in the activation notification process. As shown in -19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command or cold start notification command, the decorative design is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" as the initial design, or the set value. A part that displays a decorative symbol as an initial symbol in a combination of "4", "5", and "6" based on the reception of the change end notification command)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activated state is in which the gaming machine is in the activated state.

Furthermore, as means 6 of the invention 122SG,
When the set value is changed in the third activated state, the game control means erases the backup information stored in the backup storage means except for specific information (for example, variant 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-23, the RAM clear processing is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 excluding the data of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared. part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information in response to a change in a set value.

Furthermore, as means 7 of the invention 122SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game is provided.
The timing for erasing at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means differs between the first activated state and the second activated state (for example, as shown in the modified example 122SG-4, pachinko When starting the game machine 1 with a cold start, the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the setting changed. , The part that executes the RAM clear process at the timing after the set value change start notification command is sent to the effect control board 12)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute the erasure of the gaming information at an appropriate timing according to the activation state.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 123SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as pachinko gaming machines, for example, there are those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-42880 and those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started). When), the main board clears the backed up memory regardless of the backed up memory (general startup state), and the game machine setting value can be changed (setting startup state). If the notification modes are the same, it is not possible to specify whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and there is a problem that it is difficult to detect illegal setting changes of the gaming machine. rice field. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 123SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. The part to do) and
A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102 or RAM 122) that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
A start notification means capable of notifying the start state of the game control means when the power supply to the game machine is started (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start notification process shown in FIG. 9-17).
With
The game control means is based on a general activation state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start) in which the backup storage means is cleared and activated as the activation state, and the setting means. It has a setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) that enables the setting, and has a setting activation state (for example, a setting change state).
The activation notification means performs the notification in different modes in the general activation state and the setting activation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start as shown in FIG. 9-20). , The light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the image The part that executes the display of the message image on the display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily identify whether the starting state is the general starting state or the setting starting state, so that fraud due to the setting can be easily detected. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means can execute various notifications according to the priority.
The priority of the notification of the set activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in the modification 122SG-5, during execution of the notification during change of the setting value having a high priority, The part that prevents RAM clear notification with low priority from being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, since the notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, it is possible to prevent the fraud due to the setting from being undetectable.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means notifies the set activation state and the general activation state in different notification periods (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the notification period is 60 seconds, and the pachinko game machine 1 The notification period is 40 seconds when the device is started with the settings changed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, appropriate notification can be executed in a period corresponding to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means is
It has a first notification means (for example, an image display device 5) and a second notification means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 and speakers 8L, 8R) different from the first notification means.
The set activation state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a portion for displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-20).
The general activation state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, a portion that executes light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, since the activation notification is executed by different notification means, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state is in which.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 123SG,
The game control means is a game control (for example, a game control by a setting common as a setting related to the game progress between the game-enabled state after the set activated state and the game-enabled state after the general activated state. A game characterized in that the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning prize determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, so that it is possible to execute (a part that regulates the execution of the pre-reading notice effect up to four variable displays). The machine is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as recognition that the setting has been changed by executing the game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 124SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351, if the gaming information is unintentionally deleted due to a change in the set value, the store or the player in which the gaming machine is installed There is a risk of giving a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 124SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. The part to do) and
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
Notification means capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means will be erased (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notification process in the modification 122SG-1). When,
With
When a new set value is set by the setting means, the game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, the CPU 103 erases at least a part of the game information (for example, the CPU 103 is a modification 122SG-1). The part that executes the RAM clear processing shown in),
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on the clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on the setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off the lock switch 122SG051). Including)
The setting means can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, when the CPU 103 has the clear switch ON. After the determination (122SGSa054a; Y), the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), and the setting change completion operation is performed after the enabled setting change operation, so that the setting change operation is used. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modified example 122SG-1, the CPU 103 executes the process of 122SGsa058 after determining that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N). ),
The notification means executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as a modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first setting value change. The part that executes the set value change confirmation notification process based on the determination that the notification command has been received (122SGS410; Y))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gaming information from being unintentionally deleted by changing the set value.

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 124SG,
When the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation after the setting change start operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. After not erasing (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, the CPU 103 determines that there is no operation of the setting changeover switch (122SGSa054d; N), and then the lock switch 122SG051 is further turned off. If it is determined, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the set value change process is completed without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). Part to do)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by erasing the game information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 124SG,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not deleted by the game control means when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, as a modification 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-25, the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notification process).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the operator can recognize an operation method for preventing the gaming information from being erased, so that the gaming information is unintentionally described. It is possible to further prevent it from being erased.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 124SG,
The game control means is stored in the game information storage means when the erasing condition is satisfied and a predetermined confirmation operation is performed when the power supply to the game machine is started. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y) in the game control main process, the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed. Part to do),
The notification means also performs the notification even when the deletion condition is satisfied (for example, as a modification 122SG-2, as shown in FIG. 9-26, the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5. part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gaming information from being unintentionally deleted.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 124SG,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the effect based on the control information output from the game control means, and
An effect control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means, and
A selection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasing in the effect control storage means, and
With
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started, and the selection means selects not to execute the erasing in the effect control storage means, the game information storage Erase conditions when at least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, a part that clears only RAM 102 as shown in the modification 122SG-3) and power supply to the game machine is started. Is satisfied, and when it is selected by the selection means to execute the erasure in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. At the same time, at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, a portion that clears both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 as shown in the modified example 122SG-3).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, whether or not to execute the erasing of the effect control storage means as well as the erasing in the game information storage means when the erasing condition is satisfied. Can be selected.

Although the feature portion 122SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Even included in the present invention.

For example, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed and then the lock switch. An embodiment in which a setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed when 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y) to enable a new setting value to be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. If the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is determined first whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, and if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, in the setting change process. The RAM clear process may be executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In this way, when the RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change processing, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a), and when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), further determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (12SGSa051). 122SGSa054b). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch in 122SGsa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGsa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 122SGsa054d to 122SGsa056. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the set value (temporary set value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, the set value change end notification command is produced. It is transmitted to the control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 and the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether or not the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). When the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed, the setting value change end notification command is produced and controlled. It is transmitted to the board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

Further, when different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, they are stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the set value (the set value of the newly set pachinko gaming machine 1) stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The process is executed (122SGSa060). The RAM clear process (122SGSa060) executes the same process as the RAM clear process described with reference to FIG. 9-13, and is stored in the data (stored after the address F001) excluding the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Data) is cleared. After the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) is executed, the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change processing (122SGS061).

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main process in the modified example 122SG-1. In the effect control main process in the modification 122SG-1, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command has not been received (122SGS407; N), the first set value is changed, as shown in FIG. 9-24. It is determined whether or not the start notification command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the first setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410a; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). , The set value change confirmation notification process is executed (122SGS410b), and by changing the set value in the image display device 5, the game information etc. stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, or if the set value is not changed, the lock is used. The instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25 (A)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c). When the second set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d). When the setting value change end notification command is not received (122SGS410d; N), the processes of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17).

Further, when the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value is being changed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a). When the set value change end notification command is not received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the set value change end notification command is received. Then, when the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the set value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the setting value specification command is not received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the setting value specification command is received (122SGS411b; Y), the received setting value specification command is used. The set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” according to the set value. (Value of) is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 9-17).

As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, so that the pachinko game machine with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by the clerk of the game hall or the like. When 1 is activated, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), in the image display device 5, the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the set value, and the set value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1.

When the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the clerk of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (B), the pachinko gaming machine 1 The decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3" without changing the set value of and without clearing the RAM 102. On the other hand, when the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the clerk of the game hall turns on the clear switch again, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (C), the pachinko game machine 1 Is in the setting change state, and it is notified that the setting value is being changed by displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like.

Then, when the clerk of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051 without setting a new set value in the setting change state, or the clerk of the game hall or the like sets the new set value and is the same as the original set value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (D), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared. Instead, the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the clerk of the amusement park sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051 in the setting change state, the set value is as shown in FIG. 9-25 (E). The RAM 102 is cleared based on the change, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "4", "5", and "6".

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1, the set value is changed to the image display device 5 by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk of the game hall or the like. Illustrates the mode in which the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The image is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, an image is displayed by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch turned on by a clerk at the amusement park or the like. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the device 5 with a cold start to clear the game information stored in the RAM 102, or if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a cold start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. The instruction to perform the above may be displayed as the message image 122SG005M2.

By doing so, for example, when a clerk of a game hall or the like accidentally turns on the clear switch in an attempt to start the pachinko game machine 1 with a hot start, the pachinko game machine 1 starts with a cold start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1 and the modified example 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state or in the cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 and the message image 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5. Although a mode of confirming whether or not to clear the RAM 102 is performed by displaying the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message on the image display device 5. Whether or not it is confirmed may be performed only when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state or when it is started by the cold start, or both may be performed.

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1, the set value is changed to the image display device 5 by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk of the game hall or the like. Illustrates the mode in which the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The RAM 102 is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-27 as a modified example 122SG-3, the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started at a cold start and the set value is changed. In that case, whether or not to clear the RAM 122 according to the fact that the set value has been changed in the image display device 5 or the RAM 102 has been cleared, and the fact that these set values have been changed or the RAM 102 has been cleared. The message image 122SG005M3 including the options may be displayed, and the selection of whether or not to clear the RAM 122 may be accepted by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

When clearing the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 clears the information other than the set value information in the RAM 122 by executing the RAM clearing process (resulting in this). If you do not select to clear the RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 will not be cleared (as a result, only the RAM 102 will be cleared).

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started at the same timing (cold start notification command and setting for the effect control board 12) when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a setting change state. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before the value change start notification command is transmitted) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 122SG-4, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the pachinko machine 1 is started with a cold start, the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, the effect control is performed. Timing after sending the set value change start notification command to the board 12 (more specifically, after sending the set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, the change of the set value is completed. The timing of clearing the RAM 102 may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start or in a setting change state, such as executing a RAM clear process later).

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start state or in the setting change state. An example is a mode in which a RAM clear notification process is executed in order to notify that (RAM clear notification is executed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 122SG-5, a pachinko game When the machine 1 is started in the setting change state to notify that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (the notification during the setting value change is executed), the RAM clear notification is not executed, and so on. When a high-priority notification (for example, a notification during setting value change) is being executed, a low-priority notification (for example, a RAM clear notification) may not be executed.

When the priority is set for each notification in this way, the low priority notification may be executed after the high priority notification is executed. In this case, by executing the low-priority notification in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, it is possible to prevent the notification from being executed for a long period of time. You may.

Further, although the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment does not perform any setting for the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. At that time, the operation of confirming whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-mentioned RAM clear notification, setting value changing notification, setting value confirmation notification, and various activation notifications. .. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start or cold start, the start notification is executed for 60 seconds, so that the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the set values are changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds. Therefore, the movable body 32 is being changed during these setting values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Confirmation operation can be executed.

The confirmation operation of the movable body 32 may be executed from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, and the like. The setting value change start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, the setting value confirmation start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the like may be executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Further, when the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command, that is, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed while the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. In this case, even if the confirmation operation error occurs, the execution of the setting value changing notification may be prioritized and the confirmation operation error notification may not be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, by setting a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting changed state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). The new set value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by hot start). When the new set value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is performed. After slightly moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, a confirmation operation that can be performed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is restarted, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, a confirmation that requires a relatively long period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. The action may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period required for the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the set value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this and is cleared from the RAM 102. The specific information that is not provided may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a set value as specific information that is not cleared, a temporary set value as information to be cleared, a game information, and the like are stored in the RAM 102 has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information that cannot be cleared such as a set value, and the other RAM stores a temporary set value and a game. Cleared information such as information may be stored. By doing so, the RAM (temporary setting value, game information, etc.) on the other side is stored according to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. It is possible to make a difference whether or not to clear the RAM). Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

Further, when two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Randam Access Memory) in which a backup battery is connected to a RAM for storing specific information that is not cleared such as a set value is connected. On the other hand, by using FeRAM (Ferroelectric Randam Access Memory) as the RAM in which temporary setting values and game information are stored, it is possible to reliably clear data that is more important than other data such as setting values. It may be possible to memorize it without having to.

Further, in the feature portion 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch is the main board 11. It may be mounted on. By doing so, it is not necessary to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board is not limited thereto. A display monitor 122SG029 may be provided in the vicinity of the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in No. 11 to facilitate the operation of changing the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a display monitor 122SG029 for displaying a set value is mounted on the main board 11 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited to this. When the bonus machine 1 can calculate the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the like, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by providing the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 on the main board 11 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment illustrates a mode in which the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, it is the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start. Since the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the set value 1 is set as the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the set value 3 is set as the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the game field). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set, and the set value 3 may be set as the most advantageous set value for the player.

In particular, in the feature unit 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set in the address F000, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the most advantageous state for the player. Therefore, some players cause the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clear process (see FIG. 9-13 (A)) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to illegally set the set value 1. It is expected to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the set value 1 as the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 plays a game based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine from becoming advantageous to the person, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the special control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120 include the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Examples of modes in which whether or not an image is displayed on the display device 5 are different (controls related to notification at startup are different) are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these special controls and specific controls are used. In addition to the above-mentioned control related to the notification at the time of activation, the initial symbol (see FIG. 9-19), the background image, and the character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. Whether or not to perform control related to the production such as different things (the production mode and the production state after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played) and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 are executed. It may include control related to the confirmation operation such that the mode of the confirmation operation and the execution period are different. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be controls in which at least a part of the object controlled by the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like are different. ..

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine. For example, a game can be played by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. Is possible to start, and one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to an image display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and the variable display derived to the image display device is completed. It can also be applied to slot machines where prizes can be generated according to the result.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the embodiment, a message such as "setting is being changed" is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the setting change has been executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these notifications are transmitted by the main board 11 (CPU103). In this case, a signal that can identify that the main board 11 is changing the setting to an external management device such as a hall management computer, for example, information. The output from the terminal board may be used to notify an external device, and the main board 11 (CPU103) may display or light a display, a lamp, or the like connected to the main board 11. By controlling the state, it may be possible to notify from the outside that the setting is being changed so as to be recognizable. For example, all the indicators, lamps, and the like connected to the main board 11 may be turned on. In order to distinguish between the state where the setting is being changed and the state other than that (the state in which the game is possible), it is preferable to make the display, the lamp, etc. connected to the main board 11 emit light in a mode different from that during the normal game. ..

Further, not only when these settings are being changed, but also when the settings are being confirmed, the main board 11 (CPU103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify the user, or is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display and lighting state of the display, lamp, etc., it may be possible to notify from the outside that the setting is being confirmed so that it can be recognized.

By executing the notification by the main board 11 (CPU103) in this way, for example, even for a model that does not have the image display device 5, for example, a model such as a drum machine, the setting is being changed and the setting is confirmed. You can recognize that it is inside.

When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like for notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed may be provided. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display connected to the main board 11 (CPU103) for the purpose of preventing an increase in cost due to the provision of these dedicated lamps, LEDs, and the like. The display mode of the device 20 is a special display mode that is not displayed during a normal game (variable display, non-variable display (standby), big hit game, etc.), for example, a blinking display or a special display pattern (special special feature). It may be notified by lighting and displaying in (Fig.).

Further, in the case of providing a dedicated lamp or LED, for example, in order to prevent the player or the like from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, for example, these lamps or the like. An LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the ordinary symbol display 20.

When notifying both that the setting is being changed and that the setting is being confirmed, these states are notified (notified to the outside) in the notification mode (same output signal) of 1. Alternatively, by notifying (notifying the outside) each of these states in an individual notification mode (different output signal), it may be possible to identify which state of each state is from the outside.

Further, when it is possible to notify that the main board 11 (CPU 103) is changing the setting or confirming the setting by lighting / blinking a dedicated lamp or LED, the display control unit on the effect control board 12 Without waiting for the rise of 123 (without waiting for the display of a message such as "setting change" on the image display device 5 to start), the setting is being changed immediately by lighting / blinking the dedicated lamp or LED. It is possible to notify that there is something or that the setting is being confirmed.

(Explanation of Feature 127SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 127SG is a gaming machine in which the effect that can be executed during the variable display can be changed by the operation of the player. Hereinafter, the feature portion 127SG of the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 10-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-1 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in the feature portion 127SG (B) of the present embodiment, the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit" is used. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result and the fact that the variation display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is set as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is set as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data correspond to, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "16") in the normal open big hit state and the short-term open big hit state. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the first hold storage display area 5D or the like described later. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the second hold storage display area 5U or the like described later. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" as the judgment result at the time of winning, and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change). be. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 127SG154 shown in FIG. 10-6, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game to the big hit game state or the small hit game state as "big hit" or "small hit". It is a random value used for the purpose, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "non-probability variation" when the variation display result is "big hit". It is a random number value, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-3 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment. In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", respectively. In addition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit (special hit) fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. The feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided as described above. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment is the super reach fluctuation pattern, super reach α and super reach β. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effects of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment are executed, the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. The fluctuation pattern is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, as described above, the expectation of a big hit is set so that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature section 127SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

In addition to the game control program, various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game are stored in the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-2. ing. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, and a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 10-3. The table data and the like that make up the variation pattern table to be stored are stored.

FIG. 10-4 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. And the second special figure may use individual display result determination tables.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the fluctuation display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state and whether or not to control the fluctuation display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state. , Is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

In the display result determination table of this embodiment, the special figure display result is shown according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is a variable display as to whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the small hit game state with the result as "small hit". In the display result judgment table of this embodiment, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in this embodiment) (about 1/30 in this embodiment). ). That is, in the display result determination table, there is a probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability variation state (high probability state), it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

In the display result determination table, the same number of determination values are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" regardless of whether or not the game state is the probability change state. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state (feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment). 1/200) is constant.

FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the jackpot game state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. The table referenced to determine. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variation is displayed (variable) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether it is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot B". It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots such as ".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-5 (B). In this embodiment, high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot game state. The probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B that shift to the high accuracy high base state, and the non-probability variation jackpot that shifts to the low accuracy high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

In the big hit game state by "probability change big hit A" and the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit", as described above, 16 rounds (so-called) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are performed. 16 rounds), a big hit that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B", as described above, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). It's a big hit. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 16-round (16R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot type is different. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" and controlled to the short-term open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which a small number of winning balls are obtained, and the game interest is reduced. It can be prevented.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is determined by whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot B" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the "probability change jackpot A" is used. The assignment of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability variable jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, the variable special figure is the second special figure. Is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". You may. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than when the variable special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is "big hit", and the special figure display result is "small hit". The variation pattern judgment table for small hits used when it is pre-determined to be, and the variation pattern judgment table for misses used when it is pre-determined to set the special figure display result to "off". , Are prepared in advance.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. In this embodiment, when the type of jackpot is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot". In the case of, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it does not become “probability change jackpot A” or “probability variation jackpot B”. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, all random values within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take are determined for the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the special hit (small hit). Assigned as a value.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table is used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less and the deviation pattern determination table A is used, and when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. The variation pattern determination table B for deviation, the variation pattern determination table C for deviation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8, and the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented. The deviation pattern determination table D used for the above is prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β. Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done. Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done. Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the non-reach non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter fluctuation time than the non-reach non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern The fluctuation time of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of (PA1-2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the time for the variable display becomes long, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-2 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). NS. In particular, at least the game state, that is, the data corresponding to the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 127SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-6, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Has been done. The game control data holding area 127SG150 shown in FIG. 10-6 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 127SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 127SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 127SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 127SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 127SG153, the game control counter setting unit 127SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 127SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 127SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 127SG151A associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 127SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 127SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 127SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 127SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 127SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 127SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it passes through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 127SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 127SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 127SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 127SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 127SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 127SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 127SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 127SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 127SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 127SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an effect control data holding area 127SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 127SG190 shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 127SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 127SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 127SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 127SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 127SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 127SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 127SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 127SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 127SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 127SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 127SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 127SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 127SG194. The reception command buffer 127SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 127SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 127SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

Further, the start winning command buffer 127SG194A of the present embodiment is provided with a look-ahead notice effect such as a hold display notice effect, a background change notice effect, and a chance eye notice effect in the look-ahead notice setting process (see FIG. 10-12). A pre-reading undecided flag indicating whether or not to execute is undecided, and a hold display notice effect flag that can specify whether or not the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided and the display pattern of the hold display notice effect. , Whether or not the execution of the background change notice effect is decided, the background change notice effect flag that can specify the display pattern (background image) of the background change notice effect, and whether or not the execution of the chance eye notice effect is decided and the chance The display pattern of the eye notice effect (combined as a chance eye of the decorative pattern) can be specified. The storage area is each storage area (entry) so that the possible effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. It is secured every time. Although the details will be described later, the hold display notice effect is a game state in which the color of the hold display displayed in the first hold storage display area 127SG005D provided at the lower part of the image display device 5 is blue or red. Is a pre-reading notice effect that announces that is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the background change advance notice effect is from the normal daytime image of the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the evening or night image. It is a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces that the skill state will be controlled to the jackpot game state by changing, and the chance eye advance notice effect is when the decorative pattern is derived and displayed in the variable display executed before the advance notice target. In addition, it is a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to the big hit game state by deriving and displaying the decorative pattern in a specific combination such as "135" or "246".

In addition, the effect mode change operation restriction display effect will be described later, such as during the execution of the background change notice effect and the chance eye notice effect, during the variable display for executing the background change notice effect and the chance eye notice effect, and during the variable display of the super reach. Operation restriction display image 127SG005c (see FIG. 10-25) indicating that the effect mode cannot be changed when the effect mode change operation is accepted by the stick controller 31A during the period when the effect mode change is restricted. ) Is a display mode for notifying that the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, the first reserved storage display area 127SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 127SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. (See FIG. 10-23 (A)), the first reserved storage display area 127SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 127SG005U correspond to the special figure game based on the data stored in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A. A hold display is displayed so that the number of hold storages (special figure hold memory number) of the variable display that has been changed can be specified.

FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S101 of FIG. 5 as the start winning determination process. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (127SGS111). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (127SGS111; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (127SGS111; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (127SGS112). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 127SG154. When the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value in 127SG112 (127SGS112; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 127SG155 is set to "1" (127SGS113). ..

When the first start port switch 22A is off at 127SGS111 (127SGS111; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value at 127SGS112 (127SGS112; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (127SGS114). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (127SGS114; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the second special figure is the predetermined upper limit value (the number of reserved stored figures of the second special figure). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (127SGS115). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 127SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 127SG115 (127SGS115; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (127SGS116). ..

After executing any of the processes of 127SGS113 and 127SGS116, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the starting port buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (127SGS117). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (127SGS118). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 127SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the processing of 127SGS118, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 127SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (127SGS119). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (127SGS120). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 127SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 127SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit". Is used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 127SGS119, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variation display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variation display mode including the variation display time.

Following the processing of 127SGS120, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (127SGS121). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of 127SGS121, the random value determination processing at the time of winning is executed (127SGS122). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (127SGS123). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 127SGS123, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (127SGS124). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 127SGS124), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (127SGS125), and then the process proceeds to 127SGS114. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 127SGS124), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (127SGS126), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by 127 SGS 122 of FIG. 10-8 as a winning random number value determination process. In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set by the special symbol normal process (S112 in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of 127SGS122 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. conduct. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is, and based on this judgment result, the effect is produced. As will be described later, the control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead notice effect such as a hold display notice effect, a background change notice effect, and a chance eye notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 127SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (127SGS131). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of 127SGS131, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-4 is selected and set (127SG132). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in 127SGS119 of FIG. 10-8 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (127SGS133). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 127SGS132 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “big hit”.

When it is determined by 127SGS133 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not obtained at the time of variable display (127SGS133; N), the special figure display extracted by 127SGS119 in FIG. 10-8. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the result determination is within the predetermined small hit determination range (127SGS134). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 127SGS132 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each judgment value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing with and one by one. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the small hit judgment range, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the small hit judgment range. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “small hit”.

When it is determined by 127SGS134 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit does not occur at the time of variable display (127SGS134; N), the variation display result becomes "missing". The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (127SGS135), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (127SGS136). If the time saving flag is not set (127SGS136; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is set and the process proceeds to 127SGS144 (127SG137). If the time saving flag is set (127SGS136; Y), the time saving flag is set. The variation pattern determination table D is set and the process proceeds to 127SGS144 (127SGS138).

The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this embodiment, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 is used. B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but among these deviation pattern determination tables A to C, the deviation variation In the pattern determination table A, a value from 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take, and in the deviation pattern determination tables B and C, the value is assigned. , A value exceeding 0 to A in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, values B to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, in 127SGS144, which will be described later, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since it is a reach variation pattern, it is determined by using the deviation pattern determination table A in the determination at the time of starting winning.

When it is determined by 127SGS134 that it is within the small hit judgment value range, that is, when it is determined that it is a small hit at the time of variable display (127SGS134; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the small hit is set. Execution (127SGS139), a small hit variation pattern determination table is set as a table for determining the small hit variation pattern, and the process proceeds to 127SGS144 (127SGS140).

Further, when it is determined by 127SGS133 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot at the time of variable display (127SGS133; Y), the jackpot is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. The type is determined (127SGS141). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in 127SGS141 is executed (127SGS142), and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern to any one of a plurality. Proceed to 127 SGS 144 (127 SGS 143).

Then, in 127SGS144, the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random number value MR3 is determined by using the set variation pattern determination table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination (127SGS144). ). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B), when at least the variable display result is “missing”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” in common regardless of the total number of reserved memories. A variable category, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided and disturbed. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the numerical value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 127SGS144 to the effect control board 12 (127SGS145), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-10, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. Determine if there is a command (127SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (127SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

When there is a reception command in 127SGS221 (127SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command (127SGS222). ). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (127SGS221; Y), the waiting time for notifying the first reserved storage number is set (127SGS223). For example, in the processing of 127SGS223, if a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 127SG192. good.

If the reception command in 127SGS222 is not the first start opening prize designation command (127SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (127SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (127SGS224; Y), the waiting time for notifying the second reserved storage number is set (127SGS225). For example, in the process of 127SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

When the reception command in 127SGS224 is not the second start opening winning designation command (127SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (127SGS226). In 127SGS226, when the receiving command is not a symbol designation command (127SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the receiving command is a variable category command (127SGS227). In 127SGS227, when the reception command is not a variable category command (127SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first hold storage number notification command (127SGS228). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (127SGS228; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared (127SGS229) by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer.

When the reception command in 127SGS228 is not the first hold storage number notification command (127SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (127SGS230). Then, when it is the second hold storage number notification command (127SGS230; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared (127SGS231) by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer.

Then, after executing any of the processes of 127SGS229 and 127SGS231, the pre-reading undecided flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that it is undecided whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect. (127SGS232).

Execute either the processing of 127SGS226 when the receiving command is a symbol specification command (127SGS226; Y), 127SGS227 when the receiving command is a variable category command (127SGS227; Y), or 127SGS223, 127SGS225,127SGS232. After that, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A (127SGS233), which is not shown, and the process returns to 127SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the fluctuation start command (first fluctuation start command or second fluctuation start command), the hold storage is stored. The number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A.

If the reception command in 127SGS230 is not the second hold storage number notification command (127SGS230; N), the setting according to other reception commands is made (127SGS234), and then the process returns to 127SGS221.

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10-11, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the look-ahead rehearsal effect setting process (S161), and then is determined to execute the hold display advance notice effect described later. The hold display notice effect notification execution process (127SGS162) for notifying the start of the hold display notice effect and the hold display in the first hold storage display area 127005D and the second hold storage display area 127SG005U of the image display device 5 are started. A hold display update process (127SGS163) for updating the display according to the stored contents of the command buffer 127SG194A received at the time of winning, and a background image update process (127SGS164) for updating (changing) the background image displayed on the image display device 5. , Effect mode change process (127SGS165) for changing the feasible effect, effect mode change operation limit display effect determination process (127SGS166) for determining the execution of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect, and effect mode change. The effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process (127SGS167) for executing the operation restriction display effect and the volume change process (127SGS168) for changing the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed, and S170 to The process of S177 is executed.

An effect mode notification image 127S effect mode notification image 127SG005bG005b (see FIG. 10-25 (A)) is displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment. By visually recognizing the above, it is possible to grasp the current production mode.

10-12 and 10-13 are flowcharts showing an example of the pre-reading advance notice setting process in the effect control process process. In the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-12, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 127SG194A (126SGS301), and whether there is an entry in which the read-ahead undecided flag is "1". Whether or not, that is, whether or not there is an entry in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A for which it has not been determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined (127SGS302).

If there is no entry whose read-ahead undecided flag is "1" (127SGS302; N), the read-ahead notice setting process ends. If there is an entry in which the pre-reading undecided flag is "1" (127SGS302; Y), it is determined whether or not any of the pre-reading advance notice effects is already being executed (127SGS303). Whether or not any of the pre-reading notice effects is being executed is determined by setting the hold display notice effect flag, the background change notice effect flag, or the chance eye notice effect flag in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A. Judgment may be made based on whether or not a numerical value other than "0" is set.

If any of the pre-reading notice effects is already being executed (127SGS303; Y), the process proceeds to 127SGS320, and if none of the pre-reading notice effects is being executed (127SGS303; N), the entry (pre-reading undecided) is performed. It is determined whether or not the entry whose flag is "1") is the entry of the first special figure hold storage (127SGS304). If the entry is an entry for the second special figure reservation storage (127SGS304; N), the process proceeds to 127SGS320, and if the entry is an entry for the first special figure reservation storage (127SGS304; Y), the entry is further entered. It is determined whether or not the buffer number is any of "1-2" to "1-4", that is, whether or not at least one first special figure reservation storage exists before the entry (127SGS305). ..

If the buffer number of the entry is "1-1" (127SGS305; N), the process proceeds to 127SGS320, and if the buffer number of the entry is any of "1-2" to "1-4" (127SGS305; N). Y) determines whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (127SGS306). When the gaming state is in the high base state (127SGS306; Y), the process proceeds to 127SGS320, and when the gaming state is in the low base state (127SGS306; N), there is already a hold memory in which the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit. Whether or not it is determined (127SGS306a). If there is already a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit (127SGS306a; Y), the process proceeds to 127SGS320, and if there is no hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit (127SGS306a; Y), the effect is produced. It is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag indicating the mode is "1" (127SGS307). Although the details will be described later, when the value of the effect mode flag is "1", the effect mode is the A mode in which the hold display advance notice effect and the background change advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect. When the value of the effect mode flag is "2", it indicates that the effect mode is the B mode in which the hold display advance notice effect and the chance eye advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect.

When the value of the effect mode flag is "2", that is, when the effect mode is B mode, the process proceeds to 127SGS324, and when the value of the effect mode flag is "1", that is, when the effect mode is A mode. , Whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the effect type (hold display notice effect or background change notice effect) of the look-ahead notice effect are determined according to the symbol designation command and the variation category of the entry (127SGS308).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A), when the symbol designation command of the entry is "big hit", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and 30%. The execution of the hold display notice effect is decided at the rate of, and the execution of the background change notice effect is decided at the rate of 70%. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the variable category is "non-reach", it is decided that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed at a rate of 95%, and the hold display notice effect is executed at a rate of 5%. It is decided, and the execution of the background change notice effect is decided at a rate of 0%. If the symbol specification command is "missing" and the variable category is "other", 75% of the time, 75% of the time, the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, and 20% of the time, the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. Then, the execution of the background change notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the variable category is "super reach", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided at a rate of 65%, and the hold display notice effect is executed at a rate of 25%. It is decided, and the execution of the background change notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%. If the symbol designation command is "small hit", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

That is, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in the A mode, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case where the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined. When the ratio is high and the execution of the background change notice effect is decided, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided.

Returning to FIG. 10-12, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 127SGS308 has decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect (127SGS309). When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in 127SGS308 (127SGS309; N), the process proceeds to 127SGS320, and when it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect in 127SGS308 (127SGS309; Y), it is held and displayed as the pre-reading notice effect. It is determined whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (127SGS310). When it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect as the look-ahead notice effect (127SGS310; Y), the display pattern (hold display display mode) of the hold display notice effect is determined according to the symbol designation command and the variable category of the entry. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), when the symbol designation command of the entry is "big hit", the display pattern of the hold display notice effect (display mode of hold display) is 30%. ) Is determined to be blue, and the display pattern of the hold display notice effect (display mode of the hold display) is determined to be red at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "non-reach", the display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 95%, and 5%. The display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect is determined to be red in proportion. If the symbol designation command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "other", the display pattern of the hold display notice effect (display mode of the hold display) is determined to be blue at a rate of 80%, and the rate is 20%. The display pattern of the hold display notice effect (display mode of the hold display) is determined to be red. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "super reach", the display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 75%, and 25%. The display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect is determined to be red in proportion.

That is, when the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment decides to execute the hold notice effect, when the hold display is displayed in red as the hold display notice effect, it is more than when the hold display is displayed in blue. It is designed to be controlled to a big hit game state at a high rate.

Returning to FIG. 10-12, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode of the hold display) of the hold display notice effect determined in 127SGS311 in the hold display notice effect flag of the entry. If blue is determined as the display pattern of the hold display notice effect (display mode of the hold display), set the hold display notice effect flag to "1" and set the hold display notice effect display pattern (hold display display mode). When red is determined as the display mode), "2" may be set in the hold display notice effect flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the background change advance notice effect flag of the entry to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the background change advance notice effect, and sets the chance eye advance notice effect flag of the entry to the non-execution of the chance eye advance notice effect. “0” corresponding to the execution is set (127SGS313, 127SGS314), and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “1” indicating that the mode is A (127SGS314a).

When the value of the effect mode flag is "1", that is, when the effect mode is A mode (127SGS314a; Y), the hold display notice effect for notifying the execution of the hold display notice effect by the display of the character A. When the notification A execution decision flag is set and the process proceeds to 127SGS323 (127SGS314b) and the value of the effect mode flag is "2", that is, when the effect mode is B mode (127SGS314a; N), the hold display notice effect The hold display notice effect notification B execution decision flag for notifying the execution of the character B by the display of the character B is set, and the process proceeds to 127SGS323 (127SGS314c).

Further, in 127SGS310, when the execution of the background change notice effect is determined by 127SGS308 (127SGS310; N), the background image in the background change notice effect (background image of the change destination) according to the symbol designation command and the variation category of the entry. ) Is determined (127SGS315).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (B), when the symbol designation command of the entry is "big hit", the background image in the background change notice effect (background image of the change destination) at a rate of 30%. ) Is determined as the evening image, and the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the night image at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "non-reach", the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the evening image at a rate of 95%. The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the evening image at a rate of 5%. If the symbol specification command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "other", the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the evening image at a rate of 80%, and 20%. The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the evening image at the ratio of.
If the symbol designation command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "super reach", the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the evening image at a rate of 95%. The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the night image at a rate of%. Hold display The display pattern of the notice effect (display mode of the hold display) is determined to be red. If the symbol specification command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "other", the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the evening image at a rate of 80%, and 20%. The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the night image at the ratio of.

If the symbol designation command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "super reach", the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the evening image at a rate of 75%, and 25 The background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change notice effect is determined as the night image at a rate of%.

That is, when the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment decides to execute the background change notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the background change notice effect is changed from the daytime image to the nighttime image, which will be described later. When the image is changed, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed from the daytime image to the evening image.

Returning to FIG. 10-12, the effect control CPU 120 sets the background advance notice effect flag of the entry to a value corresponding to the background image (background image of the change destination) in the background change advance effect determined by 127SGS315 (127SGS316). If the evening image is determined as the background image (change destination background image) in the background change notice effect, set "1" in the background change notice effect flag and set the background image (change) in the background change notice effect. When the night image is determined as the previous background image), "2" may be set in the background change notice effect flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold display notice effect flag of the entry to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and sets the chance eye notice effect flag of the entry to the non-execution of the chance eye notice effect. Set "0" corresponding to the execution, and proceed to 127SGS323 (127SGS317, 127SGS318).

Further, in 127SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode change operation restriction display effect for notifying that the effect mode change operation by the stick controller 31A is restricted based on the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect. While executing the process (127SGS319), the value of the pre-reading undecided flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. ..

Further, in 127SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 has already executed the pre-reading advance notice effect, the entry is the hold storage of the second special figure, and the buffer number of the entry is "1-1". , Because the game state is in a high base state, etc., the hold display notice effect flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and the background change notice effect flag of the entry is set to the background. "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the change notice effect is set (127SGS320, 127SGS321, 127SGS322), 127SGS323 is executed, and the pre-reading notice setting process is completed.

Further, when the value of the effect mode flag is "2" in 127SGS307 (127SGS307; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed according to the symbol designation command and the variation category of the entry. The type of reading notice effect (hold display notice effect or chance eye notice effect) is determined (127SGS324).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B), when the symbol designation command of the entry is "big hit", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and 30%. The execution of the hold display notice effect is decided at the rate of, and the execution of the chance eye notice effect is decided at the rate of 70%. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the variable category is "non-reach", it is decided that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed at a rate of 95%, and the hold display notice effect is executed at a rate of 5%. It is decided, and the execution of the chance eye notice production is decided at a rate of 0%. If the symbol specification command is "missing" and the variable category is "other", 75% of the time, 75% of the time, the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, and 20% of the time, the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. Then, the execution of the chance eye notice production is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the variable category is "super reach", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided at a rate of 65%, and the hold display notice effect is executed at a rate of 25%. It is decided, and the execution of the chance eye notice production is decided at a rate of 10%. If the symbol designation command is "small hit", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

That is, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in the B mode, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case where the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined. In addition to the high ratio, when the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is decided, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is decided.

Returning to FIG. 10-13, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 127SGS324 determines the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect (127SGS325). When it is determined in 127SGS324 that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (127SGS325; N), the processes of 127SGS320 to 127SGS322 and 127SGS323 are executed to end the pre-reading notice setting process.

Further, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided in 127SGS324 (127SGS325; Y), it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided in 127SGS324 (127SGS326). When the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined in 127SGS324 (127SGS326; Y), the processes of 127SGS311 to 127SGS314c and 127SGS319 and 127SGS323 are executed to end the pre-reading notice setting process.

Further, when the execution of the chance eye notice effect is determined in 127SGS324 (127SGS326; N), the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye notice effect is determined according to the symbol designation command and the variation category of the entry (127SGS327).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (C), when the symbol designation command of the entry is "big hit", the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye notice effect is an even number at a rate of 30%. The combination "246" is determined, and the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in the chance eye notice production is determined to be an odd number combination "135" at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "non-reach", the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye notice production is determined to be an even number combination "246" at a rate of 95%. Then, at a rate of 5%, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in the chance eye notice production is determined to be an odd number combination "135". In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "super reach", the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye notice production is determined to be an even number combination "246" at a rate of 80%. At a rate of 20%, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in the chance eye notice production is determined to be an odd number combination "135". In addition, when the symbol designation command is "missing" and the fluctuation category is "super reach", the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye notice production is determined to be an even number combination "246" at a rate of 75%. At a rate of 25%, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in the chance eye notice effect is determined to be an odd number combination "135".

That is, when the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment decides to execute the chance eye notice effect, the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is "135" in the variation display before the variation display which is the target of the chance eye notice effect. When the derivation display is performed with the combination of "246", the decorative symbol is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than the case where the decorative symbol is derivated and displayed on the image display device 5 as a chance eye notice effect. ing.

Returning to FIG. 10-13, the effect control CPU 120 sets the chance eye advance notice effect flag of the entry to a value corresponding to the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye advance notice effect determined by 127SGS327 (127SGS328). If "246", which is an even number combination, is determined as the stop pattern of the decorative symbol in the chance eye advance notice effect, set "1" in the chance eye advance notice effect flag and set the decorative symbol in the chance eye advance notice effect. When "135", which is an odd number combination, is determined as the stop pattern, "2" may be set in the chance eye notice effect flag.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold display notice effect flag of the entry to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and sets the background change notice effect flag of the entry to the non-execution of the background change notice effect. "0" corresponding to the execution is set (127SGS329, 127SGS330), the processing of 127SGS323 is executed, and the pre-reading notice setting processing is completed.

In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process to display each hold display in a color corresponding to the value of the hold display notice effect flag. .. That is, when it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect (the hold display notice effect flag of any of the entries of the buffer numbers "1-2" to "1-4" in the first special figure hold storage is "1" or (When "2" is set), a new hold display is displayed in blue or red in the first hold storage display area 127SG005D immediately after the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined. When it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect (the hold display notice effect flag of any of the entries of the buffer numbers "1-2" to "1-4" in the first special figure hold memory is "0". Is set), a new hold display is displayed in castle color in the first hold storage display area 127SG005D immediately after the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to an image corresponding to the value of the background change notice effect flag by executing the background image update process. That is, when it is decided to execute the background change notice effect (the hold display notice effect flag of any of the entries of the buffer numbers "1-2" to "1-4" in the hold storage of the first special figure is "1". Or (when "2" is set), immediately after the execution of the background change notice effect is decided, the background image of the image display device 5 is a normal background image, from a daytime background image to an evening or night background image. Will be updated to. When the variation display, which is the target of the background change notice effect, is completed in the state where the background image of the evening or the night is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 performs the image display device in the background image update process. The background change notice effect may be terminated by updating the background image displayed in 5 from the evening or night background image to the daytime background image.

In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect has already been decided, or when the newly generated hold memory is the second special figure hold memory, the newly generated hold memory Is the first special figure hold memory, but when the number of hold memories is 1, the game state is in the high base state, and there is already hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. Although the embodiment for determining the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in any case, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be determined.

Further, the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the pre-reading advance notice effect is a pre-reading advance notice effect that can be executed in common regardless of the effect mode, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not necessary to provide a pre-reading notice effect that can be executed in common between the A mode and the B mode.

Further, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which it is possible to determine the execution of one pre-reading notice effect from the hold display notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect is illustrated. The invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to determine the execution of two or more pre-reading notice effects from the hold display notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect.

Further, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the hold display notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As the look-ahead notice effect, only a part of the hold display notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect may be executed, or these hold display notice effects may be executed. It may be possible to execute a pre-reading advance notice effect different from the advance notice effect, the background change advance notice effect, and the chance eye advance notice effect.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the hold display advance notice effect notification execution process shown in FIG. 10-11. In the hold display notice effect notification execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hold display notice effect notification process timer is operating (127SGS501). When the process timer for the hold display notice effect notification A is not operating (127SGS501; Y), it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect notification A execution decision flag is set (127SGS502). When the hold display notice effect notification A execution decision flag is set (127SGS502; Y), the process table for the hold display notice effect notification A is selected and the process proceeds to 127SGS506 (127SGS503), and the hold display notice effect notification A execution decision is made. When the flag is not set (127SGS502; N), it is determined whether or not the hold display advance notice effect notification B execution decision flag is set (127SGS504).

When the hold display notice effect notification B execution decision flag is set (127SGS504; Y), the process table for the hold display notice effect notification B is selected, the process proceeds to 127SGS506, and the hold display notice effect notification B execution decision flag is set. If not (127SGS504; N), the hold display notice effect notification execution process is terminated.

In 127SGS506, the effect control CPU 120 uses the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control) of the selected process table (process table for hold display notice effect notification A or process table for hold display notice effect notification B). Start control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) according to the execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) (127SGS507), and the hold display notice effect notification execution process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the process timer for the hold display notice effect notification is operating in 127SGS501 (127SGS501; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the hold display notice effect effect process timer by -1 (127SGS508) to display the hold display. It is determined whether or not the process timer for the advance notice effect notification has timed out (127SGS509). When the process timer for the hold display notice effect notification is timered out (127SGS509; Y), it is determined whether or not the last timer out is the last hold display notice effect notification timer (127SGS510).

When it is not the last timer for the hold display notice effect notification (127SGS510; N) that the timer is out, the process data for the hold display notice effect notification is switched (127SGS511). That is, the process timer for the hold display notice effect notification is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the selected process table in the hold display notice effect notification process timer (127SGS512). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. included in the process data for the hold display notice effect notification set next. (127SGS513), the hold display notice effect notification execution process is terminated.

If the timer is out of the last timer for the hold display notice effect notification (127SGS510; N), the set execution decision flag (hold display notice effect notification A execution decision flag or hold display notice effect notification B) is set. The execution decision flag) is cleared (127SGS514), and the hold display notice effect notification execution process is terminated.

In 127SGS509, when the process timer for the hold display notice effect notification does not match the timer (127SGS509; N), the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer for the hold display notice effect notification is controlled and the hold display notice is announced. The effect notification execution process is terminated (127SGS515).

FIG. 10-17 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode change process shown in FIG. 10-11. In the effect mode change process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is any of 0 to 5, that is, the game state is a low base state or a high base state, but a variable display is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is non-execution, execution of variable display, or small hit game (127SGS341). When the value of the effect control process flag is 6 or 7 (127 SGS341; N), the process proceeds to 127 SGS345, and when the value of the effect control process flag is any of 0 to 5 (127 SGS341; Y), the fluctuation of the super reach It is determined whether or not the display is in progress (127SGS342).

When the super reach fluctuation display is in progress (127SGS342; Y), the effect mode change process is terminated, and when the super reach fluctuation display is not in progress (127SGS342; N), the hold display notice is further given in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A. It is determined whether or not there is an entry in which "1" or "2" is set in any of the effect flag, the background change advance notice effect flag, and the chance eye advance notice effect flag (127SGS343). If there is an entry in which "1" or "2" is set in any of the hold display notice effect flag, background change notice effect flag, and chance eye notice effect flag, that is, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided. If so (127SGS343; Y), the effect mode change process is terminated.

In addition, when there is no entry in which "1" or "2" is set in the hold display advance notice effect flag, the background change advance notice effect flag, and the chance eye advance notice effect flag, that is, the non-execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined. If (127SGS343; N and 127SGS344; N), the process proceeds to 127SGS345.

In 127SGS345, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an effect mode change operation (operation toward the front-back direction of the stick controller 31A) (127SGS345). If there is no effect mode change operation (127SGS345; N), the effect mode change process is completed, and if there is an effect mode change operation (127SGS345; Y), whether or not the effect mode flag value is already "2". (127SGS346). When the value of the effect mode flag is "1", that is, when the effect mode is A mode (127SGS346; N), the value of the effect mode flag is incremented by 1 (127SGS347). On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode flag is already "2", that is, when the effect mode is B mode (127SGS346; Y), the value of the effect mode flag is set to "1".

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (B), when the value of the effect mode flag is "1", the hold display advance notice effect and the background change advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and as the changing advance notice effect. When the step-up notice effect can be executed in the A mode and the value of the effect mode flag is "2", the hold display notice effect and the chance eye notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the effect is changing. This is a B mode in which a dialogue notice effect can be executed as a notice effect.

When the execution of the background change notice effect is decided in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment (see FIG. 10-12), the effect is produced immediately after the pre-reading notice setting process that determines the execution of the background change notice effect. While the background image changes as the control CPU 120 executes the background image update process, when it is decided to execute the chance eye advance notice effect (see FIG. 10-12), the timing at which the next variation display ends is reached. The production design stops at the chance. That is, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the background change notice effect is decided in the A mode and when the execution of the chance eye notice effect is decided in the B mode, these background change notice effects are used. The production mode and execution timing are different between the chance eye notice production and the production.

The step-up notice effect in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment is an effect in which the mode of the step-up image displayed on the image display device 5 changes stepwise (as shown in FIGS. 10-27). The size of the characters and images displayed in the order of step-up image 127SG005x, step-up image 127SG005y, and step-up image 127SG005z changes), and the step-up image 127SG005z is most often displayed. The ratio in which the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is high, and the ratio in which the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is the lowest when the step-up image 127SG005x is finally displayed.

In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which a step-up notice effect is executed as a changing notice effect in the A mode is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. As the pre-reading notice effect, a step-up notice effect having a different effect mode from the variable advance notice effect may be executed. Further, the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the dialogue warning effect is executed as the changing notice effect in the B mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the B mode is not limited to this. , As the pre-reading notice effect, a dialogue advance notice effect different from the effect of the changing advance notice effect may be executed.

Further, the dialogue notice effect in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment is an effect in which any one of dialogue A, dialogue B, and dialogue C is displayed on the image display device, and as shown in FIGS. 10-28, dialogue is displayed. When C is displayed, the ratio of the game state being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is the highest, and when the dialogue A is displayed, the ratio of the gaming state being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is the lowest.

That is, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect mode is changed by executing the processes of 127SGS347 and 127SGS348 and changing the value of the effect mode flag.

Then, after executing the processing of 127SGS347 or 127SGS348, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect mode notification image 127SG005b according to the value of the effect mode flag, and ends the effect mode change process (127SGS349). In the processing of 127SGS349, if the effect mode flag value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect mode notification image 127SG005b to the display mode corresponding to the A mode, and if the effect mode flag value is 2. , The effect mode notification image 127SG005b may be updated to a display mode corresponding to the B mode.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process. In the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning command buffer 127SG194A, and has already set the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag to any one of "1" to "4". It is determined whether or not there is an entry in which the value of is set, that is, whether or not the execution of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect has already been determined (127SGS501).

If there is already an entry in which any of the values "1" to "4" is set in the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag (127SGS501; Y), the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process is terminated. , Effect mode change operation restriction display If there is no entry in which any value of "1" to "4" is set in the effect flag (127SGS401; N), whether or not the super reach fluctuation display is being performed. Is determined (127SGS403). When the fluctuation display of the super reach is not displayed (127SGS403; N), the start winning command buffer 127SG194A is referred to, and "1" is set in any of the hold display notice effect flag, the background change notice effect flag, and the chance eye notice effect flag. It is determined whether or not there is an entry in which "" or "2" is set, that is, whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined (127SGS404). If there is an entry in which "1" or "2" is set in any of the hold display notice effect flag, background change notice effect flag, and chance eye notice effect flag (127SGS404; Y), the process proceeds to 127SGS406 and is held. If there is no entry in which "1" or "2" is set in any of the display notice effect flag, background change notice effect flag, and chance eye notice effect flag (127SGS404; Y), the effect mode change operation restriction display is displayed. End the process.

In 127SGS406, the effect control CPU 120 is an entry in which "1" or "2" is set in any of the hold display advance notice effect flag, the background change advance notice effect flag, and the chance eye advance notice effect flag in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A. (127SGS406), and based on the specified symbol designation command, the effect pattern (display mode of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c) of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined (127SGS407).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), when the symbol designation command indicates a big hit, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined to be pattern A at a rate of 10%. Then, the pattern B is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern D is determined at a rate of 40%. If the symbol specification command indicates a loss, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined to be pattern A at a rate of 40%, pattern B at a rate of 30%, and 20%. The pattern C is determined by the ratio of, and the pattern D is determined by the ratio of 10%. When the symbol designation command indicates a small hit, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined to be pattern A at a rate of 100%, pattern B at a rate of 0%, and 0. Pattern C is determined at a rate of%, and pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (C), in the effect mode change operation restriction display effect, the pattern A is an effect pattern in which the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is "small" and the color is "blue". Yes, pattern B is an effect pattern in which the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is "small" and the color is "red", and pattern C is the effect pattern in which the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is "large" and the color is "large". The effect pattern is “blue”, and the pattern D is an effect pattern in which the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is “large” and the color is “red”.

That is, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c displayed as the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is large, it is larger than the case where the size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is small. The ratio of the game state controlled to the big hit game state is high (the ratio of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit is high), and the operation restriction display image 127SG005c displayed as the effect mode change operation restriction display effect. When the color is red, the ratio of the game state being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is blue (the ratio of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit is higher). There is.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag of the entry to a value corresponding to the effect pattern determined in 127SGS407 (“1” for pattern A, “2” for pattern B, and so on. “3” for pattern C and “4” for pattern D) are set to end the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process (127SGS408).

When the super reach is changing in 127SGS403 (127SGS403; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation display result (127SGS409), and the effect mode change operation restriction display is based on the specified variation display result. The production pattern of the production is determined (127SGS410).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined to be pattern A at a rate of 10%. Pattern B is determined at a rate of 20%, pattern C is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern D is determined at a rate of 40%. If the variable display result is lost, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined to be pattern A at a rate of 40%, pattern B at a rate of 30%, and a rate of 20%. Is determined as pattern C, and pattern D is determined at a rate of 10%. If the variable display result is a small hit, the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is determined to be pattern A at a rate of 100%, pattern B at a rate of 0%, and 0%. The pattern C is determined by the ratio, and the pattern D is determined by the ratio of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag of the entry corresponding to the entry (buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") during execution of the variation display in the start winning command buffer. In addition, a value corresponding to the effect pattern determined in 127SGS407 (“1” for pattern A, “2” for pattern B, “3” for pattern C, “4” for pattern D) is set. Set and end the effect mode change operation restriction display effect determination process (127SGS412).

As shown in FIGS. 10-19 (A) and 10-19 (B), in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, there is a case where the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined and a change in the super reach. The determination ratio of the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect is the same as that during the display execution, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined. At least a part of the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect may be different between the case and the execution of the variable display of the super reach.

Further, the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the size and color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, but the present invention is limited to this. In addition to or in place of the size and color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state is changed according to the shape, display period, display position, etc. of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c. You may.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process in the effect control process process. In the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the effect mode change operation limit display effect process timer is operating (127SGS421). When the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer is not operating (127 SGS421; N), it is determined whether or not there is an effect mode change operation (operation in the front-back direction of the stick controller 31A) (127 SGS422). When there is no effect mode change operation (127 SGS422; N), the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process is terminated, and when there is an effect mode change operation (127 SGS422; Y), the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag is further executed. Is set or not (127SGS423).

When the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag is not set (127SGS423; N), the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process is finished, and when the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag is set (127SGS423; N). ; Y) sets the process table of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect according to the value of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect flag (127SGS424). Then, the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set effect mode change operation restriction display effect process table is started (127SGS425).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data, etc.) of the set effect mode change operation restriction display effect process table. The control of the image display device 5 as a component, the game effect lamp 9 as an effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as an effect component) is started, and the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process is completed (1278 SGS426).

On the other hand, when the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer is operating in 127SGS421 (127SGS421; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer by -1 (127SGS427). It is determined whether or not the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer has timed out (127SGS428). When the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer is out of timer (127SGS428; Y), the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process data is switched (127SGS429). That is, by setting the process timer setting value set next in the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process table to the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer, the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer is started again. (S127SGS430). In addition, the control status for the effect device (effect component) is determined based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, etc. included in the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process data set next. Change (127SGS431), and end the effect mode change operation restriction display effect execution process.

When the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer is not timer-out (127SGS428; N), the effect mode is changed by controlling the contents of the process data corresponding to the effect mode change operation restriction display effect process timer. The operation restriction display effect execution process is terminated (127SGS432).

As described above, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect or during the variable display of the super reach, the effect mode cannot be changed by the effect mode change operation. The operation restriction display image 127SG005c is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the change operation of the effect mode. Further, since the operation restriction display image 127SG005c suggests the ratio of the game state being controlled to the big hit gaming state by the color and size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, the player can use the display mode of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c. It is possible to recognize the approximate ratio at which the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the volume change process in the effect control process process. In the volume change process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the confirmation sound output timer is operating (127SGS461). When the confirmation sound output timer is not operating (127SGS461; N), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (operation in the left-right direction of the stick controller 31A) (127SGS462). When there is no volume change operation (127SGS462; N), the volume change process is terminated, and when there is a volume change operation (127SGS462; Y), the volume corresponding to the volume change operation is set (127SGS463).

Specifically, for example, when the stick controller 31A is operated to the right as a volume change operation, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one step, and the stick controller 31A is moved to the left as a volume change operation. When operated to, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is reduced by one step. If the stick controller 31A is operated to the right while the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is already at the maximum volume, the maximum volume is reset and the sound already output from the speakers 8L and 8R is already output. If the stick controller 31A is operated to the left while the volume of is the minimum volume, the minimum volume may be reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume set in 127SGS464 (127SGS464), sets the confirmation sound output timer, and ends the volume change process (127SGS465). ..

When the confirmation sound output timer is operating in 127SGS461 (127SGS461; Y), the value of the confirmation sound output timer is set to -1 (127SGS466), and it is determined whether or not the confirmation sound output timer has been timered up (127SGS461). 127SGS467). When the confirmation sound output timer is timer-up (127SGS467; Y), the confirmation sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is finished and the volume change process is finished (127SGS468), and the confirmation sound output timer is not timer-up. In the case (127SGS467; N), the volume change processing is terminated without executing the processing of 127SGS468.

As described above, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect mode can be changed by operating the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction, and the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by operating the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction. It is possible to change the volume of the sound. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (A), the effect mode is changed over a period from the decision to execute the pre-reading notice effect to the end of the variable display which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice effect. On the other hand, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed regardless of whether or not the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (B), the effect mode cannot be changed during the execution of the variable display of the super reach, while the change in the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is the super reach. It is possible regardless of whether or not the

FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (127SGS351). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (127SGS351; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (127SGS352). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (127SGS351; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (127SGS353). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (127SGS353; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (127SGS353; Y), the start is started. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the command buffer 127SG194A received at the time of winning are higher by one buffer number. Shift to (127SGS354). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing 127SGS352 or 127SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (127SGS355).

Next, it is determined whether or not "1" or "2" is set in the chance eye notice effect flag of any of the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A. (127SGS356). When only "0" is set in the chance eye notice effect flag of any of the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A (127SGS356; N), the display result The display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the designated command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (S276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the processing of 127SGS357, when the received variation display result specification command corresponds to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols in which 3 symbols are "7" or "3" as stop symbols. (Big hit design) is decided. If the received variable display result specification command corresponds to the probability variation jackpot B, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) in which the three symbols are odd numbers different from "7" and "3" is determined as the stop symbol. .. If the received variable display result specification command corresponds to a non-probability variable jackpot, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are even numbers is determined as a stop symbol. If the received variable display result specification command corresponds to a loss, the combination of the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol and the combination of the decorative symbols to be the reach loss (loss symbol) are determined. If the received variable display result specification command corresponds to a small hit, the combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbols) in which the three symbols are arranged with special symbols different from the numbers is determined as the stop symbol.

On the other hand, if "1" or "2" is set in any of the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A, the chance eye notice effect flag is set to the chance eye. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the value of the advance notice effect flag (127SGS358).

In the process of 127SGS358, the effect control CPU 120 sets "1" to any of the chance eye advance notice effect flags of the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A. If so, the combination of "246" (first chance symbol) in which the three symbols are even numbers is determined as the stop symbol of the loss, and the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1" in the start winning command buffer 127SG194A are determined. When "2" is set in any of the chance eye notice effect flags of "-4", the combination of "135" (second chance symbol) in which 3 symbols are odd is determined as the stop symbol of loss. ..

After executing the processing of 127SGS357 or 127SGS358, the effect control CPU 120 executes the changing advance notice effect determination process, and determines whether or not to execute the changing advance notice effect and the effect pattern of the changing advance notice effect according to the effect mode. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (A), when the effect mode is A mode, if the variation display result is a big hit, it is decided not to execute the step-up notice effect at a rate of 10%. The one-step display of the step-up image (the effect pattern that only displays the step-up image 127SG005x) is determined at a rate of 10%, and the two-step display of the step-up image (step-up image 127SG005x → step-up) is determined at a rate of 30%. The effect pattern to be displayed in the order of the image 127SG005y) is determined, and the three-stage display of the step-up image (the effect pattern to be displayed in the order of step-up image 127SG005x → step-up image 127SG005y → step-up image 127SG005z) is determined at a rate of 50%. ..

If the variable display result is non-reach loss, the non-execution of the step-up notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%, the one-step display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 20%, and the step is performed at a rate of 0%. The two-stage display of the up image is determined, and the three-stage display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 0%.

If the variable display result is other loss such as normal reach loss, 50% of the time, 50% of the time, the non-execution of the step-up notice effect is decided, and 30% of the time, the one-step display of the step-up image is decided. The two-step display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of%, and the three-step display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 0%.

If the variable display result is a super reach loss, the non-execution of the step-up notice effect is decided at a rate of 30%, the one-step display of the step-up image is decided at a rate of 15%, and the step is performed at a rate of 40%. The two-stage display of the up image is determined, and the three-stage display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 15%.

If the variable display result is a small hit, the non-execution of the step-up notice effect is determined at a rate of 100%, the one-step display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 0%, and the step is performed at a rate of 00%. The two-stage display of the up image is determined, and the three-stage display of the step-up image is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (B), when the effect mode is the B mode, if the variation display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the dialogue notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and 10%. The display of the dialogue A (the effect pattern for displaying the dialogue A) is determined by the ratio, the display of the dialogue B (the production pattern for displaying the dialogue B) is determined at the ratio of 30%, and the display of the dialogue C is determined at the ratio of 50%. (The effect pattern for displaying the dialogue C) is determined.

If the variable display result is non-reach loss, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the dialogue notice effect is decided, 20% of the time, the display of the dialogue A is decided, and 0% of the ratio, the display of the dialogue B is displayed. Determine and determine the display of 0% percentage dialogue C.

In addition, if the variable display result is other loss such as normal reach loss, 50% of the time decides not to execute the dialogue notice effect, 30% decides to display the dialogue A, and 20% decides to display the dialogue A. The display of the line B is determined, and the display of the line C is determined at a rate of 0%.

If the variable display result is a super reach loss, 30% of the time, 30% of the time, the non-execution of the dialogue notice effect is decided, 15% of the time, the display of the dialogue A is decided, and 40% of the ratio, the display of the dialogue B is displayed. Determine and determine the display of dialogue C at a rate of 15%.

If the variable display result is a small hit, the non-execution of the dialogue notice effect is determined at a rate of 100%, the display of dialogue A is determined at a ratio of 0%, and the display of dialogue B is determined at a ratio of 00%. Determine and determine the display of dialogue C at a rate of 0%.

Regarding the changing notice effect whose execution is decided, while the variable display effect processing is being executed, the process table corresponding to the changing notice effect whose execution is decided is set, and the process timer for the changing notice effect is set. By starting, the process data processing in the set process table should be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (1287 SGS363). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (127SGS364).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (127SGS365).

In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the variation display of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one is performed, but the effect control CPU 120 May select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (127SGS366). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (127SGS367). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and responds to the image data written in the VRAM. The signal is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby the variation of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (127SGS368).

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-25 to 10-28.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (A) and 10-25 (B), in the low base state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, the effect is displayed on the upper right portion of the image display device 5. The mode notification image 127SG005b is displayed. Then, in the state where the variable display is not executed or the non-reach or normal reach variable display is executed, the effect mode is switched by the player operating the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction. Further, when the effect mode is switched by the operation of the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction, the effect mode notification image 127SG005b changes to the display mode according to the effect mode to which the effect mode notification image 127SG005b is switched, and the player can change the display mode according to the effect mode notification image 127SG005b. It is possible to recognize the current production mode by visually recognizing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (C) to 10-25 (E), the pre-reading notice effect (in FIG. 10-25, the chance eye notice effect) is executed based on the occurrence of a new start winning prize. If is determined, it is impossible to change the effect mode by operating the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction from the time when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided until the end of the variable display of the look-ahead notice effect. Become. Further, when the operation in the front-rear direction of the stick controller 31A is detected during the period when the effect mode cannot be changed, the operation limit display image 127SG005c is used as the effect mode change operation restriction display effect, and the effect mode notification image 127SG005b is used. It is displayed in duplicate in.

At this time, the operation restriction display image 127SG005c differs depending on whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit (whether or not the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state) depending on the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The color and size are different depending on the ratio, and the player can recognize the approximate ratio in which the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state by the color and size of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (C), the start prize is won when the pre-reading notice effect is not executed and the non-reach or normal reach variable display is being executed. Is generated, and when the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided based on the start winning, the hold display notice effect notification according to the set effect mode is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), when the effect mode is the A mode, the image 127SG005A of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and the image 127SG005A of the character A is displayed. It is notified that the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. The hold display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, is displayed in blue or red. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), when the effect mode is the B mode, the image 127SG005B of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the image 127SG005B of the character B gives a notice of holding display. It is decided to execute the effect. Hold display notice It is notified that the hold display, which is the target of the effect, is displayed in blue or red.

As shown in FIGS. 10-26 (B) and 10-26 (C), when the hold display notice effect and the hold display notice effect notification are executed, the background change notice effect and the chance eye notice effect are executed. As in the case where is determined, the effect mode cannot be changed.

Further, when the effect mode is the A mode, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (D), the step-up notice effect may be executed during the variable display. As the step-up notice effect, only the step-up image 127SG005x is displayed as the first step, the step-up image 127SG005y is displayed as the second step after the step-up image 127SG005x, and after the step-up image 127SG005y. As the third step, the step-up image 127SG005z may be displayed, and when the step-up image 127SG005z is displayed, the rate of the variable display result being the big hit is the highest, and the case where only the step-up image 127SG005x is displayed is the most. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is low.

Further, when the effect mode is the B mode, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (D), as the dialogue notice effect, the dialogue A is displayed and the dialogue B is displayed. There are cases where it is displayed and there are cases where the dialogue C is displayed. When the dialogue C is displayed, the rate at which the variable display result is the largest hit is high, and when the dialogue A is displayed, the variable display result is the largest hit. The ratio is low.

As described above, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect mode can be changed by operating the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction, and when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided or during the variable display of the super reach, etc. If the stick controller 31A is operated in the front-rear direction during the period during which the effect mode cannot be changed, the effect mode cannot be changed by displaying the operation restriction display image 127SG005c on the image display device 5. In addition to being able to make the player recognize that, it is possible to suggest that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state by the size and color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c. While attracting the attention of the player, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when the color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is red, the ratio of the game state being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than that when the color is blue. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the color of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is blue, the ratio of the gaming state controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be higher than when the color is red. .. Further, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is large, the ratio of the game state being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is small. The operation restriction display image 127SG005c is not limited, and when the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is small, the ratio of the game state being controlled to the big hit game state may be higher than when the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is large.

Further, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the proportion of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit is different according to the operation restriction display image 127SG005c has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. In addition to the effect suggesting that the variable display result such as the pre-reading notice effect and the variable advance notice effect will be a big hit according to the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, and the effect suggesting that the state is highly accurate. The execution ratio of a specific look-ahead notice effect (for example, a hold display notice effect) or an effect suggesting that the variable advance notice effect is executed may be different.

In addition, regarding the change of the effect mode, if the super reach is changing or if it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the change that is the target of the pre-reading advance notice effect until the variation display of these super reach ends. While it is impossible until the display is finished, it is always possible to change the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R regardless of the fluctuation of the super reach or the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Sound output from speakers 8L and 8R appropriately without unnecessary restrictions being executed during a period when the production mode cannot be changed, such as when the super reach is changing or when the pre-reading notice effect is decided to be executed. You can change the volume of.

In addition, regarding the change of the effect mode, if the super reach is changing or if it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the change that is the target of the pre-reading advance notice effect until the variation display of these super reach ends. Although it is impossible until the display is completed, if the stick controller is operated in the front-rear direction (operation to change the effect mode) during the period when the effect mode cannot be changed, the image display device 5 is used. Since it is possible to display the operation restriction display image 127SG005c and suggest that the variable display result becomes a big hit depending on the display mode of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, it is possible to play a game during the period when the effect mode cannot be changed. Can be improved.

Further, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not the hold memory for which the fluctuation display has not been executed in advance is controlled to the jackpot game state by executing the random number value determination process at the time of winning, and the effect control CPU 120 The execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined based on the determination result of the winning random number value determination process of the CPU 103. Then, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination result of the winning random number value determination process of the CPU 103 in the effect mode change process 127 SGS343 shown in FIG. 10-17, 127 SGS345 Since the effect mode change is not executed by ending the effect mode change process without executing the 127SGS349 process, the waste that the pre-reading advance notice effect is repeatedly determined due to the effect mode change is eliminated. can do.

In particular, the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment allows the effect mode to be changed after tentatively deciding to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect (for example, the background change advance notice effect in the case of A mode) according to the effect mode. After switching the effect mode, it is necessary to execute the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the chance eye advance effect in the case of B mode) and determine the effect mode (effect pattern) of the pre-read notice effect, which is a processing load. Will increase and the production will be inconsistent. For the above reasons, in the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, the change of the effect mode is restricted to avoid an increase in processing load and inconsistency in the effect. There is.

Further, in the case where the execution of the background change notice effect is decided in the A mode and the case where the execution of the chance eye notice effect is decided in the B mode, the effect mode and the effect are in the background change notice effect and the chance eye notice effect. Since the timings are different, it is possible to prevent the production mode and production timing of these pre-reading advance notice effects from becoming inappropriate.

In the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment, the effect mode and the effect timing are different depending on whether the background change notice effect is decided to be executed in the A mode or the chance eye notice effect is decided in the B mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of the effect may be the same for the background change advance notice effect and the chance eye advance notice effect. Further, in the case where the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided in the A mode and the case where the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided in the B mode, the effect of the hold display notice effect is produced according to the effect mode in which the execution is decided. At least one of the mode (display mode of the hold display) and the effect timing may be different.

When it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect as the look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-26, the image display device 5 starts displaying the hold display in blue or red, and also produces the effect. Hold display notice effect notification according to the mode is executed. Further, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the hold display notice effect in 127 SGS343 of the effect mode change process shown in FIG. 10-17, and 127SGS345. Since the effect mode change is not executed by ending the effect mode change process without executing the process of ~ 127 SGS349, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate hold display advance notice effect notification from being executed.

In addition, in the feature unit 127SG of this embodiment, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided as the pre-reading notice effect, the mode of executing the hold display notice effect notification corresponding to the effect mode is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect as the look-ahead notice effect, even if the hold display notice effect notification of a common mode is executed regardless of the effect mode. good.

Further, the feature unit 127SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the hold display notice effect notification is executed when the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined as the look-ahead notice effect. When it is decided to execute the background change notice effect or the chance eye notice effect as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution of the background change notice effect or the chance eye notice effect is notified. You may.

Although the feature portion 127SG of the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 127SG of the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A is irrespective of whether or not the background change notice effect and the chance eye notice effect are being executed, and whether or not the super reach variation display is being executed. Although the mode in which the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed by operating the speaker 8L and 8R in the left-right direction is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. As shown in FIGS. 10-29 (D), the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R by operating the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect, the execution of the fluctuation display of the super reach, and the like. May be disabled. Further, it is impossible to change the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R by operating the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction during the execution of the background change advance notice effect and the chance eye advance notice effect, the execution of the super reach variation display, and the like. If so, it indicates that it is impossible to change the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the fact that the operation in the left-right direction of the stick controller 31A is executed during the period when the volume cannot be changed. The volume changeable notification image 127SG005e may be displayed on the image display device 5 so that the player can be accurately notified that the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R cannot be changed.

Further, like the operation restriction display image 127SG005c described above, it may be suggested that the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state depending on the display mode (size and color) of the volume changeable notification image 127SG005e.

Further, in the feature unit 127SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the effect mode is changed by operating the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction to make the effect that can be executed in each effect mode different is illustrated. The effect is not limited, and a plurality of effect modes having different execution frequencies of the effect may be provided, and these effect modes may be changed by operating the stick controller 31A in the front-rear direction.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C) as the modified example 127SG-2, the execution frequency of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the execution frequency of the variable advance notice effect are normal (medium). ), The evening mode, in which the pre-reading notice effect is executed frequently and the pre-reading notice effect is executed infrequently, the pre-reading notice effect is executed infrequently, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed frequently, based on the day mode. A night mode is provided (execution frequency of pre-reading notice effect: evening> noon> night, execution frequency of fluctuating advance notice effect: night> noon> evening), and these three effect modes can be switched by operating the stick controller 31A in the front-back direction. If possible. Further, when the effect mode is switched, the current effect mode is any of day, evening, and night by displaying the background image corresponding to the effect mode to which the switch is made on the image display device 5. It may be easy for the player to recognize whether or not.

Further, in the feature unit 127SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect mode operation restriction display is displayed during the period when the effect mode cannot be changed, such as during the variable display of the super reach or when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is decided. An example is illustrated in which the operation restriction display image 127SG005c having the same display mode is displayed each time the operation in the front-rear direction (change operation of the effect mode) of the stick controller 31A is executed by executing the effect determination process only once. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by executing the effect mode operation restriction display effect determination process each time the effect mode change operation is executed during the period during which the effect mode cannot be changed. The operation restriction display image 127SG005c may be displayed in a different display mode each time the effect mode change operation is executed during the period during which the effect mode cannot be changed.

Further, in the feature unit 127SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is displayed as a suggestion effect in the present invention is exemplified based on the effect mode change operation during the period when the effect mode cannot be changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the display mode of the decorative symbol during the variable display is changed based on the operation of changing the effect mode during the period when the effect mode cannot be changed. The suggestion effect may be executed in an effect mode different from the display of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, such as displaying an image different from the operation restriction display image 127SG005c on the image display device 5, operating the movable body 32, and the like. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a form in which a title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (feature portion 31AK in FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12). Different commands are transmitted from the main board 11 (CPU 103) to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) according to the activated state of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by cold start and the setting is changed. It is possible to execute a start notification in a different mode from the case of starting, and when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a form of notifying that the RAM 102 is cleared (FIGS. 9-1 to 9-27). The effect mode can be changed by operating the feature unit 122SG) and the stick controller 31A, and during the period when the change of the effect mode is restricted, the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is displayed based on the operation of the stick controller 31A. A form (FIGS. 10-1 to 10-30) that is displayed and suggests that the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is disclosed in the display mode of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been disclosed. May apply a plurality of feature parts among these feature parts.

For example, when the feature unit 122SG and the feature unit 127SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation restriction display image 127SG005c is displayed based on the operation of the stick controller 31A during the period in which the change of the effect mode is restricted. It may be displayed and suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the display mode of the operation restriction display image 127SG005c.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
An effect execution means that can execute an effect according to the progress of the game,
A production mode selection means that can select one production mode from a plurality of production modes,
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
With
The effect mode selection means can select the effect mode based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means.
The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect suggesting content that is advantageous to the player, and may display a plurality of restriction displays for notifying that a predetermined limit is being executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition related to the effect. Can be displayed in different display modes,
Ri ratio Do different to the suggestion effect is performed by the display mode of the limit indication,
The predetermined limitation is that the effect mode cannot be selected by the effect mode selection means.
The effect executing means can display the restriction display based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means during the execution of the predetermined restriction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images